1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2020 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/android_kabi.h>
22 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
23 #include <net/codel.h>
24 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
26
27 /**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36 /**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48 */
49
50 /**
51 * DOC: Warning
52 *
53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57 /**
58 * DOC: Frame format
59 *
60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72 */
73
74 /**
75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
89 /**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
93 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
94 * between different stations/interfaces.
95 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
96 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
97 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
98 *
99 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
100 * driver operation.
101 *
102 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
103 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
104 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105 *
106 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108 *
109 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
110 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
111 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
112 *
113 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
114 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
115 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
116 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
117 * ieee80211_return_txq().
118 *
119 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
120 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
121 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
122 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
123 * .release_buffered_frames().
124 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
125 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
126 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
127 */
128
129 struct device;
130
131 /**
132 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
133 *
134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
135 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
136 */
137 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
139 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
140 };
141
142 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
143
144 /**
145 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
147 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
149 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
150 */
151 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
152 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
153 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
154 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
155 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
156 };
157
158 /**
159 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
160 *
161 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
162 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
163 *
164 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
165 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
166 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
167 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
168 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
169 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
170 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
171 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
172 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
173 */
174 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
175 u16 txop;
176 u16 cw_min;
177 u16 cw_max;
178 u8 aifs;
179 bool acm;
180 bool uapsd;
181 bool mu_edca;
182 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
183 };
184
185 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
186 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
187 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
188 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
189 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
190 };
191
192 /**
193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
197 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
198 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
199 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
200 */
201 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
206 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
207 };
208
209 /**
210 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
211 *
212 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
213 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
214 *
215 * @def: the channel definition
216 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
217 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
218 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
219 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
220 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
221 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
222 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
223 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
224 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
225 */
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
227 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
228 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
229
230 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
231
232 bool radar_enabled;
233
234 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
235 };
236
237 /**
238 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
239 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
240 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
241 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
242 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
243 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
244 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
245 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
246 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
247 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
248 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
249 * for changes/removal.)
250 */
251 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
253 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
254 };
255
256 /**
257 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
258 *
259 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
260 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
261 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
262 * done.
263 *
264 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
265 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
266 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
267 */
268 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
271 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
272 };
273
274 /**
275 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
276 *
277 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
278 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
279 *
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
281 * also implies a change in the AID.
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
288 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
289 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
290 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
291 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
292 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
293 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
297 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
298 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
304 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
305 * changed
306 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
307 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
308 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
309 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
310 * context had been assigned.
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
313 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
314 * keep alive) changed.
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
316 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
317 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
320 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
322 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
323 * status changed.
324 *
325 */
326 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
327 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
328 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
329 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
330 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
331 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
332 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
333 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
334 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
335 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
336 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
337 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
338 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
339 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
340 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
341 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
342 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
343 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
344 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
345 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
346 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
347 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
348 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
349 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
350 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
351 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
352 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
353 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
354 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
355 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
356 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
357 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
358 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
359
360 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
361 };
362
363 /*
364 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
365 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
366 * filtering will be disabled.
367 */
368 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
369
370 /**
371 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
372 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
373 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
374 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
375 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
376 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
377 * once each time the timeout triggers.
378 */
379 enum ieee80211_event_type {
380 RSSI_EVENT,
381 MLME_EVENT,
382 BAR_RX_EVENT,
383 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
384 };
385
386 /**
387 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
388 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
389 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
390 */
391 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
392 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
393 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
394 };
395
396 /**
397 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
398 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
399 */
400 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
401 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
402 };
403
404 /**
405 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
406 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
407 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
408 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
409 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
410 */
411 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
412 AUTH_EVENT,
413 ASSOC_EVENT,
414 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
415 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
416 };
417
418 /**
419 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
420 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
421 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
422 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
423 */
424 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
425 MLME_SUCCESS,
426 MLME_DENIED,
427 MLME_TIMEOUT,
428 };
429
430 /**
431 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
432 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
433 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
434 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
435 */
436 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
437 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
438 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
439 u16 reason;
440 };
441
442 /**
443 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
444 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
445 * @tid: the tid
446 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
447 */
448 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
449 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
450 u16 tid;
451 u16 ssn;
452 };
453
454 /**
455 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
456 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
457 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
458 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
459 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
460 * @u:union holding the fields above
461 */
462 struct ieee80211_event {
463 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
464 union {
465 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
466 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
467 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
468 } u;
469 };
470
471 /**
472 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
473 *
474 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
475 *
476 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
477 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
478 */
479 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
480 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
481 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
482 };
483
484 /**
485 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
486 *
487 * @lci: LCI subelement content
488 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
489 * @lci_len: LCI data length
490 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
491 */
492 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
493 const u8 *lci;
494 const u8 *civicloc;
495 size_t lci_len;
496 size_t civicloc_len;
497 };
498
499 /**
500 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
501 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
502 *
503 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
504 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
505 */
506 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
507 u32 min_interval;
508 u32 max_interval;
509 };
510
511 /**
512 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
513 *
514 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
515 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
516 *
517 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
518 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
519 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
520 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
521 * ACK, BACK or both
522 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
523 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
524 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
525 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
526 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
527 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
528 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
529 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
530 * @assoc: association status
531 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
532 * or not
533 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
534 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
535 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
536 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
537 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
538 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
539 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
540 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
541 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
542 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
543 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
544 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
545 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
546 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
547 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
548 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
549 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
550 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
551 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
552 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
553 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
554 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
555 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
556 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
557 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
558 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
559 * the current band.
560 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
561 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
562 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
563 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
564 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
565 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
566 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
567 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
568 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
569 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
570 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
571 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
572 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
573 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
574 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
575 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
576 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
577 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
578 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
579 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
580 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
581 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
582 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
583 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
584 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
585 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
586 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
587 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
588 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
589 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
590 * your driver/device needs to do.
591 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
592 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
593 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
594 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
595 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
596 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
597 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
598 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
599 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
600 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
601 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
602 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
603 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
604 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
605 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
606 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
607 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
608 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
609 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
610 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
611 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
612 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
613 * station.
614 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
615 * responder functionality.
616 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
617 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
618 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
619 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
620 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
621 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
622 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
623 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
624 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
625 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
626 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
627 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
628 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
629 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
630 * interval.
631 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
632 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
633 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
634 */
635 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
636 const u8 *bssid;
637 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
638 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
639 bool uora_exists;
640 bool ack_enabled;
641 u8 uora_ocw_range;
642 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
643 bool he_support;
644 bool twt_requester;
645 bool twt_responder;
646 bool twt_protected;
647 /* association related data */
648 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
649 bool ibss_creator;
650 u16 aid;
651 /* erp related data */
652 bool use_cts_prot;
653 bool use_short_preamble;
654 bool use_short_slot;
655 bool enable_beacon;
656 u8 dtim_period;
657 u16 beacon_int;
658 u16 assoc_capability;
659 u64 sync_tsf;
660 u32 sync_device_ts;
661 u8 sync_dtim_count;
662 u32 basic_rates;
663 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
664 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
665 u16 ht_operation_mode;
666 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
667 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
668 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
669 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
670 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
671 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
672 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
673 int arp_addr_cnt;
674 bool qos;
675 bool idle;
676 bool ps;
677 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
678 size_t ssid_len;
679 bool hidden_ssid;
680 int txpower;
681 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
682 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
683 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
684 u16 max_idle_period;
685 bool protected_keep_alive;
686 bool ftm_responder;
687 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
688 /* Multiple BSSID data */
689 bool nontransmitted;
690 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
691 u8 bssid_index;
692 u8 bssid_indicator;
693 bool ema_ap;
694 u8 profile_periodicity;
695 struct {
696 u32 params;
697 u16 nss_set;
698 } he_oper;
699 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
700 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
701 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
702 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
703 bool s1g;
704 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
705
706 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
707 };
708
709 /**
710 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
711 *
712 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
713 *
714 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
715 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
716 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
717 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
718 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
719 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
720 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
721 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
722 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
723 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
724 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
725 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
726 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
727 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
728 * station
729 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
730 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
731 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
734 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
735 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
736 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
737 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
738 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
739 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
740 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
741 * hardware queue.
742 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
743 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
744 * is for the whole aggregation.
745 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
746 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
747 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
748 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
749 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
750 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
751 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
752 * off-channel operation.
753 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
754 * (header conversion)
755 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
756 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
757 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
758 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
760 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
761 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
762 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
763 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
764 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
765 * queue gets full.
766 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
767 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
768 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
769 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
770 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
771 * should kick the MLME state machine.
772 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
773 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
774 * status to user space)
775 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
776 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
777 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
778 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
779 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
780 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
781 * handled properly by the device.
782 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
783 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
784 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
785 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
786 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
787 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
788 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
789 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
790 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
791 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
792 * PS-Poll responses.
793 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
794 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
795 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
796 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
797 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
798 * monitor injection).
799 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
800 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
801 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
802 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
803 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
804 *
805 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
806 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
807 */
808 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
809 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
810 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
811 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
812 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
813 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
814 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
815 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
816 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
817 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
818 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
819 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
820 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
821 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
822 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
823 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
824 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
825 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
826 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
827 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
828 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
829 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
830 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
831 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
832 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
833 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
834 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
835 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
836 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
837 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
838 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
839 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
840 };
841
842 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
843
844 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
845
846 /**
847 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
848 *
849 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
850 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
851 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
852 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
853 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
854 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
855 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
856 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
857 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
858 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
859 * it can be sent out.
860 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
861 * has already been assigned to this frame.
862 *
863 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
864 */
865 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
866 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
867 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
868 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
869 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
870 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
871 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
872 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
873 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
874 };
875
876 /*
877 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
878 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
879 */
880 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
881 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
882 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
883 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
884 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
885 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
886 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
887 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
888
889 /**
890 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
891 * Rate Control algorithm.
892 *
893 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
894 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
895 *
896 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
897 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
898 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
899 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
900 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
901 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
902 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
903 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
904 * Greenfield mode.
905 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
906 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
907 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
908 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
909 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
910 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
911 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
912 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
913 */
914 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
915 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
916 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
917 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
918
919 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
920 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
921 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
922 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
923 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
924 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
925 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
926 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
927 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
928 };
929
930
931 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
932 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
933
934 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
935 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
936
937 /* maximum number of rate stages */
938 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
939
940 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
941 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
942
943 /**
944 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
945 *
946 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
947 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
948 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
949 *
950 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
951 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
952 *
953 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
954 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
955 *
956 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
957 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
958 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
959 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
960 * information::
961 *
962 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
963 *
964 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
965 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
966 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
967 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
968 * information should then contain::
969 *
970 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
971 *
972 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
973 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
974 */
975 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
976 s8 idx;
977 u16 count:5,
978 flags:11;
979 } __packed;
980
981 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
982
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)983 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
984 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
985 {
986 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
987 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
988 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
989 }
990
991 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)992 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
993 {
994 return rate->idx & 0xF;
995 }
996
997 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)998 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
999 {
1000 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1001 }
1002
1003 /**
1004 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1005 *
1006 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1007 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1008 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1009 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1010 *
1011 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1012 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
1013 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1014 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1015 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1016 * @control: union part for control data
1017 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1018 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1019 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1020 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1021 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1022 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1023 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1024 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1025 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1026 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1027 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1028 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1029 * @pad: padding
1030 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1031 * @status: union part for status data
1032 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1033 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1034 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1035 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1036 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1037 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1038 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1039 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
1040 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1041 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1042 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1043 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1044 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1045 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1046 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1047 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1048 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1049 */
1050 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1051 /* common information */
1052 u32 flags;
1053 u32 band:3,
1054 ack_frame_id:13,
1055 hw_queue:4,
1056 tx_time_est:10;
1057 /* 2 free bits */
1058
1059 union {
1060 struct {
1061 union {
1062 /* rate control */
1063 struct {
1064 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1065 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1066 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1067 u8 use_rts:1;
1068 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1069 u8 short_preamble:1;
1070 u8 skip_table:1;
1071 /* 2 bytes free */
1072 };
1073 /* only needed before rate control */
1074 unsigned long jiffies;
1075 };
1076 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1077 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1078 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1079 u32 flags;
1080 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1081 } control;
1082 struct {
1083 u64 cookie;
1084 } ack;
1085 struct {
1086 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1087 s32 ack_signal;
1088 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1089 u8 ampdu_len;
1090 u8 antenna;
1091 u16 tx_time;
1092 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1093 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1094 } status;
1095 struct {
1096 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1097 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1098 u8 pad[4];
1099
1100 void *rate_driver_data[
1101 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1102 };
1103
1104 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1105
1106 void *driver_data[
1107 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1108 };
1109 };
1110
1111 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1112 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1113 {
1114 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1115 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1116 */
1117 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1118 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1119 }
1120
1121 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1122 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1123 {
1124 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1125 }
1126
1127 /**
1128 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1129 *
1130 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1131 * @info: Basic tx status information
1132 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1133 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1134 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1135 */
1136 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1137 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1138 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1139 struct sk_buff *skb;
1140 struct rate_info *rate;
1141 struct list_head *free_list;
1142 };
1143
1144 /**
1145 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1146 *
1147 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1148 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1149 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1150 *
1151 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1152 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1153 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1154 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1155 */
1156 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1157 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1158 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1159 const u8 *common_ies;
1160 size_t common_ie_len;
1161 };
1162
1163
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1164 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1165 {
1166 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1167 }
1168
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1169 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1170 {
1171 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1172 }
1173
1174 /**
1175 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1176 *
1177 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1178 *
1179 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1180 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1181 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1182 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1183 *
1184 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1185 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1186 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1187 */
1188 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1189 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1190 {
1191 int i;
1192
1193 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1194 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1195 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1196 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1197 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1198 /* clear the rate counts */
1199 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1200 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1201
1202 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1203 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1204 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1205 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1206 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1207 }
1208
1209
1210 /**
1211 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1212 *
1213 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1214 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1215 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1216 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1217 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1218 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1219 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1220 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1221 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1222 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1223 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1224 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1225 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1226 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1227 * de-duplication by itself.
1228 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1229 * the frame.
1230 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1231 * the frame.
1232 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1233 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1234 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1235 * merging.
1236 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1237 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1238 * (including FCS) was received.
1239 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1240 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1241 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1242 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1243 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1244 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1245 * each A-MPDU
1246 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1247 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1248 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1249 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1250 * on this subframe
1251 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1252 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1253 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1254 * done by the hardware
1255 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1256 * processing it in any regular way.
1257 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1258 * them for sniffing purposes.
1259 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1260 * monitor interfaces.
1261 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1262 * them for sniffing purposes.
1263 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1264 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1265 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1266 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1267 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1268 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1269 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1270 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1271 * interleaved with other frames.
1272 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1273 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1274 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1275 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1276 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1277 * the first subframe.
1278 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1279 * be done in the hardware.
1280 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1281 * frame
1282 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1283 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1284 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1285 *
1286 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1287 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1288 * - DATA3_CODING
1289 * - DATA5_GI
1290 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1291 * - DATA6_NSTS
1292 * - DATA3_STBC
1293 *
1294 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1295 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1296 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1297 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1298 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1299 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1300 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1301 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1302 */
1303 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1304 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1305 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1306 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1307 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1308 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1309 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1310 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1311 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1312 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1313 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1314 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1315 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1316 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1317 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1318 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1319 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1320 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1321 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1322 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1323 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1324 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1325 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1326 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1327 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1328 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1329 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1330 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1331 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1332 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1333 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1334 };
1335
1336 /**
1337 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1338 *
1339 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1340 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1341 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1342 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1343 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1344 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1345 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1346 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1347 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1348 */
1349 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1350 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1351 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1352 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1353 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1354 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1355 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1356 };
1357
1358 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1359
1360 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1361 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1362 RX_ENC_HT,
1363 RX_ENC_VHT,
1364 RX_ENC_HE,
1365 };
1366
1367 /**
1368 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1369 *
1370 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1371 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1372 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1373 *
1374 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1375 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1376 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1377 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1378 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1379 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1380 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1381 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1382 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1383 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1384 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1385 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1386 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1387 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1388 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1389 * values were filled.
1390 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1391 * support dB or unspecified units)
1392 * @antenna: antenna used
1393 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1394 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1395 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1396 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1397 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1398 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1399 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1400 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1401 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1402 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1403 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1404 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1405 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1406 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1407 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1408 */
1409 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1410 u64 mactime;
1411 u64 boottime_ns;
1412 u32 device_timestamp;
1413 u32 ampdu_reference;
1414 u32 flag;
1415 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1416 u8 enc_flags;
1417 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1418 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1419 u8 rate_idx;
1420 u8 nss;
1421 u8 rx_flags;
1422 u8 band;
1423 u8 antenna;
1424 s8 signal;
1425 u8 chains;
1426 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1427 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1428 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1429 };
1430
1431 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1432 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1433 {
1434 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1435 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1436 }
1437
1438 /**
1439 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1440 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1441 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1442 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1443 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1444 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1445 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1446 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1447 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1448 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1449 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1450 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1451 * @data field.
1452 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1453 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1454 * length
1455 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1456 *
1457 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1458 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1459 * data.
1460 */
1461 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1462 u32 present;
1463 u8 align;
1464 u8 oui[3];
1465 u8 subns;
1466 u8 pad;
1467 u16 len;
1468 u8 data[];
1469 } __packed;
1470
1471 /**
1472 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1473 *
1474 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1475 *
1476 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1477 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1478 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1479 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1480 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1481 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1482 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1483 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1484 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1485 * for more.
1486 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1487 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1488 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1489 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1490 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1491 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1492 * operating channel.
1493 */
1494 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1495 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1496 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1497 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1498 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1499 };
1500
1501
1502 /**
1503 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1504 *
1505 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1506 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1507 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1508 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1509 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1510 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1511 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1512 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1513 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1514 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1515 */
1516 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1517 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1518 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1519 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1520 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1521 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1522 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1523 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1524 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1525 };
1526
1527 /**
1528 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1529 *
1530 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1531 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1532 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1533 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1534 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1535 */
1536 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1537 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1538 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1539 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1540 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1541
1542 /* keep last */
1543 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1544 };
1545
1546 /**
1547 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1548 *
1549 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1550 *
1551 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1552 *
1553 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1554 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1555 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1556 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1557 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1558 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1559 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1560 *
1561 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1562 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1563 *
1564 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1565 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1566 *
1567 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1568 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1569 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1570 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1571 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1572 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1573 *
1574 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1575 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1576 * configured for an HT channel.
1577 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1578 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1579 */
1580 struct ieee80211_conf {
1581 u32 flags;
1582 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1583
1584 u16 listen_interval;
1585 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1586
1587 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1588
1589 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1590 bool radar_enabled;
1591 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1592
1593 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1594 };
1595
1596 /**
1597 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1598 *
1599 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1600 * operation.
1601 *
1602 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1603 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1604 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1605 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1606 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1607 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1608 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1609 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1610 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1611 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1612 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1613 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1614 * channel, expressed in TU.
1615 */
1616 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1617 u64 timestamp;
1618 u32 device_timestamp;
1619 bool block_tx;
1620 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1621 u8 count;
1622 u32 delay;
1623 };
1624
1625 /**
1626 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1627 *
1628 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1629 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1630 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1631 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1632 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1633 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1634 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1635 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1636 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1637 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1638 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1639 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1640 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1641 */
1642 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1643 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1644 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1645 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1646 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1647 };
1648
1649
1650 /**
1651 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1652 *
1653 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1654 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1655 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1656 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1657 */
1658
1659 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1660 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1661 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1662 };
1663
1664 /**
1665 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1666 *
1667 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1668 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1669 *
1670 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1671 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1672 * or the BSS we're associated to
1673 * @addr: address of this interface
1674 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1675 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1676 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1677 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1678 * for read access.
1679 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1680 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1681 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1682 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1683 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1684 * @offloaad_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1685 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1686 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1687 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1688 * restrictions.
1689 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1690 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1691 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1692 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1693 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1694 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1695 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1696 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1697 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1698 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1699 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1700 * interface.
1701 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1702 * for this interface.
1703 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1704 * sizeof(void \*).
1705 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1706 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1707 * protected by fq->lock.
1708 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1709 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1710 */
1711 struct ieee80211_vif {
1712 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1713 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1714 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1715 bool p2p;
1716 bool csa_active;
1717 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1718
1719 u8 cab_queue;
1720 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1721
1722 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1723
1724 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1725
1726 u32 driver_flags;
1727 u32 offload_flags;
1728
1729 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1730 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1731 #endif
1732
1733 bool probe_req_reg;
1734 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1735
1736 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1737
1738 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1739
1740 /* must be last */
1741 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1742 };
1743
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1744 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1745 {
1746 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1747 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1748 #endif
1749 return false;
1750 }
1751
1752 /**
1753 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1754 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1755 *
1756 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1757 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1758 *
1759 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1760 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1761 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1762 */
1763 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1764
1765 /**
1766 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1767 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1768 *
1769 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1770 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1771 *
1772 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1773 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1774 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1775 */
1776 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1777
1778 /**
1779 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1780 *
1781 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1782 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1783 *
1784 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1785 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1786 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1787 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1788 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1789 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1790 * generation in software.
1791 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1792 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1793 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1794 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1795 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1796 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1797 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1798 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1799 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1800 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1801 * MIC.
1802 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1803 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1804 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1805 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1806 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1807 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1808 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1809 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1810 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1811 * only for management frames (MFP).
1812 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1813 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1814 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1815 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1816 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1817 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1818 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1819 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1820 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1821 * generation only
1822 */
1823 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1824 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1825 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1826 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1827 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1828 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1829 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1830 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1831 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1832 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1833 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1834 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1835 };
1836
1837 /**
1838 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1839 *
1840 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1841 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1842 *
1843 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1844 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1845 * encrypted in hardware.
1846 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1847 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1848 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1849 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1850 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1851 * @keylen: key material length
1852 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1853 * data block:
1854 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1855 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1856 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1857 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1858 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1859 */
1860 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1861 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1862 u32 cipher;
1863 u8 icv_len;
1864 u8 iv_len;
1865 u8 hw_key_idx;
1866 s8 keyidx;
1867 u16 flags;
1868 u8 keylen;
1869 u8 key[];
1870 };
1871
1872 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1873
1874 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1875 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1876
1877 /**
1878 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1879 *
1880 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1881 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1882 * reverse order than in packet)
1883 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1884 * reverse order than in packet)
1885 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1886 * reverse order than in packet)
1887 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1888 * reverse order than in packet)
1889 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1890 */
1891 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1892 union {
1893 struct {
1894 u32 iv32;
1895 u16 iv16;
1896 } tkip;
1897 struct {
1898 u8 pn[6];
1899 } ccmp;
1900 struct {
1901 u8 pn[6];
1902 } aes_cmac;
1903 struct {
1904 u8 pn[6];
1905 } aes_gmac;
1906 struct {
1907 u8 pn[6];
1908 } gcmp;
1909 struct {
1910 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1911 u8 seq_len;
1912 } hw;
1913 };
1914 };
1915
1916 /**
1917 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1918 *
1919 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1920 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1921 *
1922 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1923 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1924 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1925 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1926 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1927 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1928 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1929 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1930 * key_idx value calculation:
1931 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1932 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1933 */
1934 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1935 u32 cipher;
1936 u16 iftype;
1937 u8 hdr_len;
1938 u8 pn_len;
1939 u8 pn_off;
1940 u8 key_idx_off;
1941 u8 key_idx_mask;
1942 u8 key_idx_shift;
1943 u8 mic_len;
1944 };
1945
1946 /**
1947 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1948 *
1949 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1950 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1951 *
1952 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1953 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1954 */
1955 enum set_key_cmd {
1956 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1957 };
1958
1959 /**
1960 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1961 *
1962 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1963 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1964 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1965 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1966 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1967 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1968 */
1969 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1970 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1971 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1972 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1973 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1974 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1975 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1976 };
1977
1978 /**
1979 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1980 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1981 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1982 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1983 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1984 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1985 *
1986 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1987 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1988 */
1989 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1990 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1991 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1992 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1993 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1994 };
1995
1996 /**
1997 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1998 *
1999 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2000 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2001 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2002 */
2003 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2004 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2005 struct {
2006 s8 idx;
2007 u8 count;
2008 u8 count_cts;
2009 u8 count_rts;
2010 u16 flags;
2011 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2012 };
2013
2014 /**
2015 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2016 *
2017 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2018 *
2019 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2020 * to the STA.
2021 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2022 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2023 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2024 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2025 * per peer TPC.
2026 */
2027 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2028 s16 power;
2029 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2030 };
2031
2032 /**
2033 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2034 *
2035 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2036 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2037 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2038 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2039 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2040 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2041 *
2042 * @addr: MAC address
2043 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2044 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
2045 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2046 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2047 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2048 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2049 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2050 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2051 * Can be modified by driver.
2052 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2053 * otherwise always false)
2054 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2055 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2056 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2057 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2058 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2059 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2060 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2061 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2062 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2063 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2064 * the station moves to associated state.
2065 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2066 * @rates: rate control selection table
2067 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2068 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2069 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2070 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2071 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2072 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2073 * unlimited.
2074 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2075 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2076 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2077 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2078 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2079 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2080 */
2081 struct ieee80211_sta {
2082 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2083 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2084 u16 aid;
2085 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2086 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2087 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2088 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2089 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2090 bool wme;
2091 u8 uapsd_queues;
2092 u8 max_sp;
2093 u8 rx_nss;
2094 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2095 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2096 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2097 bool tdls;
2098 bool tdls_initiator;
2099 bool mfp;
2100 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2101
2102 /**
2103 * @max_amsdu_len:
2104 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2105 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2106 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2107 *
2108 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2109 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2110 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2111 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2112 *
2113 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2114 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2115 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2116 */
2117 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2118 bool support_p2p_ps;
2119 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2120 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2121 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2122
2123 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2124
2125 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2126
2127 /* must be last */
2128 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2129 };
2130
2131 /**
2132 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2133 *
2134 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2135 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2136 *
2137 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2138 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2139 */
2140 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2141 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2142 };
2143
2144 /**
2145 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2146 *
2147 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2148 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2149 */
2150 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2151 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2152 };
2153
2154 /**
2155 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2156 *
2157 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2158 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2159 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2160 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2161 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2162 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2163 *
2164 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2165 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2166 */
2167 struct ieee80211_txq {
2168 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2169 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2170 u8 tid;
2171 u8 ac;
2172
2173 /* must be last */
2174 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2175 };
2176
2177 /**
2178 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2179 *
2180 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2181 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2182 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2183 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2184 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2185 *
2186 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2187 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2188 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2189 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2190 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2191 * algorithm.
2192 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2193 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2194 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2195 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2196 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2197 * CCK frames.
2198 *
2199 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2200 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2201 * the FCS at the end.
2202 *
2203 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2204 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2205 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2206 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2207 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2208 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2209 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2210 *
2211 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2212 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2213 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2214 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2215 *
2216 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2217 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2218 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2219 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2220 *
2221 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2222 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2223 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2224 *
2225 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2226 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2227 *
2228 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2229 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2230 *
2231 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2232 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2233 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2234 *
2235 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2236 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2237 *
2238 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2239 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2240 *
2241 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2242 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2243 * the stack.
2244 *
2245 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2246 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2247 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2248 *
2249 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2250 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2251 * dtim_period).
2252 *
2253 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2254 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2255 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2256 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2257 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2258 * only in that case.
2259 *
2260 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2261 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2262 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2263 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2264 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2265 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2266 *
2267 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2268 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2269 * software.
2270 *
2271 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2272 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2273 * active interfaces.
2274 *
2275 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2276 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2277 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2278 *
2279 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2280 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2281 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2282 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2283 * supported cipher suites.
2284 *
2285 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2286 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2287 * for frames.
2288 *
2289 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2290 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2291 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2292 * control for more details.
2293 *
2294 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2295 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2296 *
2297 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2298 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2299 * is supported.
2300 *
2301 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2302 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2305 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2306 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2307 *
2308 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2309 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2310 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2311 * CSA frame.
2312 *
2313 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2314 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2315 *
2316 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2317 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2318 *
2319 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2320 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2321 *
2322 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2323 * within A-MPDU.
2324 *
2325 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2326 * for sent beacons.
2327 *
2328 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2329 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2330 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2331 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2332 *
2333 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2334 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2335 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2336 * timeout.
2337 *
2338 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2339 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2340 *
2341 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2342 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2343 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2344 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2345 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2346 *
2347 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2348 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2349 *
2350 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2351 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2352 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2353 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2354 *
2355 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2356 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2357 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2358 *
2359 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2360 * TDLS links.
2361 *
2362 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2363 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2364 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2365 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2366 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2367 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2368 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2369 *
2370 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2371 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2372 *
2373 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2374 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2375 *
2376 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2377 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2378 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2379 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2380 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2381 *
2382 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2383 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2384 * TXQs to start with.
2385 *
2386 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2387 * length in tx status information
2388 *
2389 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2390 *
2391 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2392 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2393 *
2394 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2395 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2396 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2397 *
2398 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2399 * offload
2400 *
2401 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2402 */
2403 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2404 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2405 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2406 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2407 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2408 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2409 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2410 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2411 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2412 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2413 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2414 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2415 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2416 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2417 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2418 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2419 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2420 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2421 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2422 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2423 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2424 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2425 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2426 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2427 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2428 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2429 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2430 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2431 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2432 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2433 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2434 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2435 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2436 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2437 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2438 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2439 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2440 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2441 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2442 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2443 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2444 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2445 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2446 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2447 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2448 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2449 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2450 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2451 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2452 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2453 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2454
2455 /* keep last, obviously */
2456 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2457 };
2458
2459 /**
2460 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2461 *
2462 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2463 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2464 *
2465 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2466 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2467 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2468 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2469 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2470 *
2471 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2472 *
2473 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2474 * along with this structure.
2475 *
2476 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2477 *
2478 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2479 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2480 *
2481 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2482 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2483 *
2484 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2485 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2486 *
2487 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2488 * that HW supports
2489 *
2490 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2491 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2492 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2493 *
2494 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2495 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2496 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2497 *
2498 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2499 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2500 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2501 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2502 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2503 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2504 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2505 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2506 *
2507 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2508 * can handle.
2509 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2510 * the hw can report back.
2511 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2512 *
2513 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2514 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2515 * aggregation.
2516 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2517 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2518 * it shouldn't be set.
2519 *
2520 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2521 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2522 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2523 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2524 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2525 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2526 *
2527 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2528 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2529 *
2530 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2531 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2532 *
2533 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2534 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2535 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2536 * adding _BW is supported today.
2537 *
2538 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2539 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2540 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2541 *
2542 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2543 *
2544 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2545 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2546 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2547 * device_timestamp.
2548 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2549 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2550 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2551 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2552 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2553 *
2554 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2555 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2556 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2557 *
2558 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2559 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2560 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2561 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2562 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2563 * neither enabled.
2564 *
2565 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2566 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2567 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2568 *
2569 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2570 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2571 * supported by HW.
2572 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2573 * device.
2574 *
2575 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2576 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2577 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2578 *
2579 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2580 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2581 *
2582 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2583 */
2584 struct ieee80211_hw {
2585 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2586 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2587 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2588 void *priv;
2589 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2590 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2591 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2592 int vif_data_size;
2593 int sta_data_size;
2594 int chanctx_data_size;
2595 int txq_data_size;
2596 u16 queues;
2597 u16 max_listen_interval;
2598 s8 max_signal;
2599 u8 max_rates;
2600 u8 max_report_rates;
2601 u8 max_rate_tries;
2602 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2603 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2604 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2605 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2606 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2607 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2608 struct {
2609 int units_pos;
2610 s16 accuracy;
2611 } radiotap_timestamp;
2612 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2613 u8 uapsd_queues;
2614 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2615 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2616 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2617 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2618 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2619 u8 weight_multiplier;
2620 u32 max_mtu;
2621
2622 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2623 };
2624
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2625 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2626 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2627 {
2628 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2629 }
2630 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2631
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2632 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2633 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2634 {
2635 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2636 }
2637 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2638
2639 /**
2640 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2641 *
2642 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2643 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2644 */
2645 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2646 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2647
2648 /* Keep last */
2649 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2650 };
2651
2652 /**
2653 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2654 *
2655 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2656 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2657 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2658 * @status: channel-switch response status
2659 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2660 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2661 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2662 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2663 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2664 */
2665 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2666 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2667 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2668 u8 action_code;
2669 u32 status;
2670 u32 timestamp;
2671 u16 switch_time;
2672 u16 switch_timeout;
2673 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2674 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2675 };
2676
2677 /**
2678 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2679 *
2680 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2681 *
2682 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2683 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2684 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2685 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2686 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2687 *
2688 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2689 */
2690 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2691
2692 /**
2693 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2694 *
2695 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2696 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2697 */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2698 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2699 {
2700 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2701 }
2702
2703 /**
2704 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2705 *
2706 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2707 * @addr: the address to set
2708 */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2709 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2710 {
2711 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2712 }
2713
2714 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2715 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2716 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2717 {
2718 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2719 return NULL;
2720 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2721 }
2722
2723 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2724 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2725 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2726 {
2727 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2728 return NULL;
2729 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2730 }
2731
2732 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2733 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2734 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2735 {
2736 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2737 return NULL;
2738 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2739 }
2740
2741 /**
2742 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2743 * @hw: the hardware
2744 * @skb: the skb
2745 *
2746 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2747 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2748 */
2749 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2750
2751 /**
2752 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2753 *
2754 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2755 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2756 *
2757 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2758 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2759 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2760 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2761 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2762 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2763 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2764 *
2765 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2766 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2767 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2768 *
2769 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2770 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2771 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2772 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2773 *
2774 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2775 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2776 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2777 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2778 *
2779 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2780 *
2781 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2782 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2783 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2784 * based on the receive flags.
2785 *
2786 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2787 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2788 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2789 * keys.
2790 *
2791 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2792 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2793 * handler.
2794 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2795 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2796 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2797 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2798 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2799 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2800 *
2801 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2802 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2803 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2804 *
2805 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2806 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
2807 * requirements:
2808 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2809 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2810 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2811 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2812 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2813 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2814 encrypted with the new key and
2815 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2816 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2817 */
2818
2819 /**
2820 * DOC: Powersave support
2821 *
2822 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2823 *
2824 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2825 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2826 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2827 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2828 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2829 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2830 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2831 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2832 *
2833 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2834 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2835 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2836 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2837 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2838 *
2839 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2840 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2841 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2842 *
2843 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2844 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2845 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2846 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2847 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2848 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2849 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2850 *
2851 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2852 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2853 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2854 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2855 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2856 * periods.
2857 *
2858 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2859 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2860 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2861 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2862 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2863 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2864 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2865 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2866 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2867 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2868 *
2869 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2870 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2871 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2872 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2873 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2874 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2875 *
2876 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2877 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2878 */
2879
2880 /**
2881 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2882 *
2883 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2884 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2885 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2886 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2887 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2888 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2889 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2890 *
2891 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2892 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2893 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2894 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2895 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2896 *
2897 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2898 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2899 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2900 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2901 *
2902 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2903 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2904 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2905 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2906 *
2907 * - a list of information element IDs
2908 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2909 *
2910 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2911 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2912 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2913 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2914 * vendor information elements.
2915 *
2916 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2917 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2918 *
2919 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2920 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2921 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2922 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2923 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2924 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2925 *
2926 *
2927 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2928 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2929 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2930 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2931 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2932 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2933 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2934 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2935 *
2936 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2937 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2938 * signal strength threshold checking.
2939 */
2940
2941 /**
2942 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2943 *
2944 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2945 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2946 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2947 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2948 *
2949 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2950 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2951 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2952 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2953 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2954 * hardware flags.
2955 *
2956 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2957 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2958 * turned off otherwise.
2959 *
2960 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2961 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2962 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2963 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2964 */
2965
2966 /**
2967 * DOC: Frame filtering
2968 *
2969 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2970 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2971 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2972 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2973 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2974 *
2975 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2976 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2977 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2978 *
2979 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2980 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2981 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2982 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2983 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2984 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2985 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2986 *
2987 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2988 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2989 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2990 * or dropped.
2991 *
2992 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2993 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2994 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2995 * the flag, but not clear it.
2996 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2997 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2998 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2999 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3000 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3001 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3002 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3003 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3004 */
3005
3006 /**
3007 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3008 *
3009 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3010 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3011 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3012 *
3013 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3014 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3015 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3016 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3017 * the driver code.
3018 *
3019 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3020 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3021 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3022 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3023 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3024 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3025 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3026 *
3027 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3028 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3029 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3030 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3031 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3032 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3033 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3034 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3035 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3036 * @sta_notify callback.
3037 *
3038 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3039 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3040 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3041 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3042 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3043 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3044 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3045 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3046 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3047 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3048 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3049 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3050 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3051 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3052 *
3053 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3054 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3055 *
3056 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3057 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3058 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3059 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3060 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3061 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3062 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3063 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3064 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3065 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3066 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3067 *
3068 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3069 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3070 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3071 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3072 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3073 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3074 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3075 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3076 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3077 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3078 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3079 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3080 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3081 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3082 *
3083 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3084 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3085 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3086 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3087 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3088 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3089 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3090 *
3091 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3092 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3093 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3094 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3095 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3096 *
3097 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3098 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3099 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3100 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3101 */
3102
3103 /**
3104 * DOC: HW queue control
3105 *
3106 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3107 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3108 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3109 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3110 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3111 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3112 *
3113 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3114 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3115 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3116 *
3117 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3118 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3119 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3120 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3121 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3122 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3123 * the hardware queue.
3124 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3125 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3126 *
3127 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3128 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3129 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3130 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3131 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3132 *
3133 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3134 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3135 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3136 * off-channel queue: 9
3137 *
3138 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3139 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3140 *
3141 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3142 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3143 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3144 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3145 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3146 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3147 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3148 *
3149 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3150 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3151 *
3152 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3153 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3154 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3155 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3156 */
3157
3158 /**
3159 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3160 *
3161 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3162 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3163 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3164 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3165 *
3166 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3167 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3168 * multicast address.
3169 *
3170 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3171 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3172 *
3173 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3174 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3175 *
3176 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3177 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3178 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3179 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3180 * honour this flag if possible.
3181 *
3182 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3183 * station
3184 *
3185 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3186 *
3187 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3188 *
3189 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3190 *
3191 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3192 */
3193 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3194 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3195 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3196 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3197 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3198 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3199 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3200 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3201 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3202 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3203 };
3204
3205 /**
3206 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3207 *
3208 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3209 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3210 *
3211 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3212 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3213 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3214 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3215 *
3216 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3217 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3218 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3219 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3220 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3221 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3222 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3223 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3224 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3225 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3226 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3227 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3228 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3229 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3230 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3231 * session is gone and removes the station.
3232 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3233 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3234 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3235 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3236 */
3237 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3238 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3239 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3240 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3241 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3242 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3243 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3244 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3245 };
3246
3247 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3248 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3249
3250 /**
3251 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3252 *
3253 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3254 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3255 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3256 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3257 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3258 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3259 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3260 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3261 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3262 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3263 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3264 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3265 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3266 */
3267 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3268 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3269 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3270 u16 tid;
3271 u16 ssn;
3272 u16 buf_size;
3273 bool amsdu;
3274 u16 timeout;
3275 };
3276
3277 /**
3278 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3279 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3280 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3281 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3282 */
3283 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3284 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3285 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3286 };
3287
3288 /**
3289 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3290 *
3291 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3292 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3293 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3294 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3295 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3296 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3297 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3298 * the peer.
3299 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3300 * by the peer
3301 */
3302 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3303 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3304 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3305 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3306 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3307 };
3308
3309 /**
3310 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3311 *
3312 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3313 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3314 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3315 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3316 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3317 *
3318 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3319 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3320 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3321 */
3322 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3323 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3324 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3325 };
3326
3327 /**
3328 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3329 *
3330 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3331 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3332 *
3333 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3334 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3335 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3336 * of wowlan configuration)
3337 */
3338 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3339 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3340 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3341 };
3342
3343 /**
3344 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3345 *
3346 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3347 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3348 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3349 *
3350 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3351 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3352 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3353 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3354 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3355 * Must be atomic.
3356 *
3357 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3358 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3359 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3360 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3361 * or zero.
3362 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3363 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3364 * is added.
3365 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3366 *
3367 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3368 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3369 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3370 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3371 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3372 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3373 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3374 *
3375 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3376 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3377 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3378 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3379 * reconfigured at resume time.
3380 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3381 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3382 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3383 * must return 1 from this function.
3384 *
3385 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3386 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3387 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3388 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3389 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3390 *
3391 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3392 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3393 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3394 * in suspend().
3395 *
3396 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3397 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3398 * and @stop must be implemented.
3399 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3400 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3401 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3402 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3403 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3404 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3405 *
3406 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3407 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3408 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3409 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3410 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3411 *
3412 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3413 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3414 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3415 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3416 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3417 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3418 * MAC address of the device going away.
3419 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3420 *
3421 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3422 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3423 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3424 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3425 *
3426 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3427 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3428 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3429 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3430 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3431 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3432 * can sleep.
3433 *
3434 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3435 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3436 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3437 *
3438 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3439 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3440 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3441 *
3442 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3443 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3444 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3445 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3446 * which flags are changed.
3447 * This callback can sleep.
3448 *
3449 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3450 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3451 *
3452 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3453 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3454 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3455 * is enabled.
3456 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3457 * The callback can sleep.
3458 *
3459 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3460 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3461 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3462 * The callback must be atomic.
3463 *
3464 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3465 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3466 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3467 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3468 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3469 *
3470 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3471 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3472 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3473 *
3474 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3475 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3476 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3477 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3478 * that power save is disabled.
3479 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3480 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3481 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3482 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3483 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3484 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3485 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3486 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3487 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3488 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3489 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3490 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3491 * The callback can sleep.
3492 *
3493 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3494 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3495 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3496 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3497 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3498 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3499 * The callback can sleep.
3500 *
3501 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3502 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3503 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3504 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3505 *
3506 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3507 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3508 *
3509 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3510 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3511 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3512 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3513 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3514 *
3515 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3516 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3517 * this notification.
3518 * The callback can sleep.
3519 *
3520 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3521 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3522 * The callback can sleep.
3523 *
3524 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3525 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3526 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3527 * The callback must be atomic.
3528 *
3529 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3530 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3531 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3532 * should be set as well.
3533 * The callback can sleep.
3534 *
3535 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3536 * The callback can sleep.
3537 *
3538 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3539 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3540 *
3541 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3542 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3543 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3544 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3545 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3546 * This callback can sleep.
3547 *
3548 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3549 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3550 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3551 * callback can sleep.
3552 *
3553 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3554 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3555 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3556 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3557 *
3558 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3559 * power for the station.
3560 * This callback can sleep.
3561 *
3562 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3563 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3564 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3565 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3566 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3567 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3568 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3569 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3570 * The callback can sleep.
3571 *
3572 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3573 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3574 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3575 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3576 * in @sta_state.
3577 * The callback can sleep.
3578 *
3579 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3580 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3581 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3582 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3583 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3584 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3585 * Must be atomic.
3586 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3587 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3588 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3589 *
3590 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3591 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3592 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3593 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3594 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3595 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3596 * The callback can sleep.
3597 *
3598 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3599 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3600 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3601 * The callback can sleep.
3602 *
3603 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3604 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3605 * required function.
3606 * The callback can sleep.
3607 *
3608 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3609 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3610 * required function.
3611 * The callback can sleep.
3612 *
3613 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3614 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3615 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3616 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3617 * The callback can sleep.
3618 *
3619 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3620 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3621 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3622 * TSF synchronization.
3623 * The callback can sleep.
3624 *
3625 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3626 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3627 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3628 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3629 * The callback can sleep.
3630 *
3631 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3632 *
3633 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3634 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3635 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3636 * The callback can sleep.
3637 *
3638 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3639 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3640 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3641 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3642 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3643 *
3644 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3645 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3646 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3647 *
3648 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3649 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3650 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3651 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3652 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3653 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3654 * The callback can sleep.
3655 *
3656 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3657 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3658 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3659 * completion of the channel switch.
3660 *
3661 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3662 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3663 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3664 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3665 *
3666 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3667 *
3668 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3669 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3670 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3671 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3672 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3673 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3674 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3675 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3676 * must be accepted in this case.
3677 * This callback may sleep.
3678 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3679 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3680 *
3681 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3682 *
3683 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3684 *
3685 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3686 * queues before entering power save.
3687 *
3688 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3689 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3690 * The callback can sleep.
3691 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3692 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3693 * The callback must be atomic.
3694 *
3695 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3696 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3697 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3698 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3699 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3700 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3701 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3702 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3703 * more-data bit must always be set.
3704 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3705 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3706 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3707 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3708 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3709 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3710 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3711 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3712 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3713 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3714 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3715 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3716 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3717 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3718 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3719 * This callback must be atomic.
3720 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3721 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3722 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3723 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3724 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3725 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3726 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3727 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3728 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3729 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3730 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3731 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3732 * This callback must be atomic.
3733 *
3734 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3735 *
3736 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3737 *
3738 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3739 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3740 *
3741 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3742 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3743 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3744 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3745 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3746 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3747 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3748 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3749 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3750 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3751 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3752 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3753 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3754 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3755 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3756 * duration for which the operation is requested.
3757 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3758 *
3759 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3760 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3761 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3762 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3763 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3764 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3765 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3766 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3767 *
3768 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3769 * This callback may sleep.
3770 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3771 * This callback may sleep.
3772 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3773 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3774 * channel context with different settings
3775 * This callback may sleep.
3776 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3777 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3778 * This callback may sleep.
3779 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3780 * unbound from vif.
3781 * This callback may sleep.
3782 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3783 * another, as specified in the list of
3784 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3785 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3786 * This callback may sleep.
3787 *
3788 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3789 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3790 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3791 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3792 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3793 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3794 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3795 *
3796 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3797 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3798 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3799 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3800 * This callback may sleep.
3801 *
3802 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3803 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3804 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3805 *
3806 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3807 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3808 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3809 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3810 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3811 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3812 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3813 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3814 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3815 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3816 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3817 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3818 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3819 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3820 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3821 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3822 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3823 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3824 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3825 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3826 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3827 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3828 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3829 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3830 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3831 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3832 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3833 *
3834 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3835 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3836 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3837 *
3838 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3839 * and hardware limits.
3840 *
3841 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3842 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3843 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3844 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3845 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3846 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3847 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3848 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3849 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3850 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3851 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3852 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3853 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3854 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3855 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3856 * the function call.
3857 *
3858 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3859 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3860 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3861 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3862 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3863 *
3864 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3865 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3866 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3867 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3868 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3869 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3870 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3871 * changed parameters.
3872 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3873 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3874 * this call.
3875 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3876 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3877 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3878 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3879 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3880 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3881 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3882 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3883 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3884 *
3885 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3886 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3887 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3888 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3889 * This callback may sleep.
3890 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
3891 * This callback may sleep.
3892 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
3893 * 4-address mode
3894 */
3895 struct ieee80211_ops {
3896 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3897 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3898 struct sk_buff *skb);
3899 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3900 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3901 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3902 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3903 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3904 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3905 #endif
3906 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3907 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3908 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3909 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3910 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3911 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3912 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3913 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3914 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3915 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3916 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3917 u32 changed);
3918
3919 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3920 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3921
3922 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3923 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3924 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3925 unsigned int changed_flags,
3926 unsigned int *total_flags,
3927 u64 multicast);
3928 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3930 unsigned int filter_flags,
3931 unsigned int changed_flags);
3932 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3933 bool set);
3934 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3935 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3936 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3937 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3939 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3940 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3941 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3942 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3943 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3944 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3945 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3947 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3948 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3949 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3950 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3951 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3952 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3953 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3954 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3955 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3956 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3957 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3958 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3959 const u8 *mac_addr);
3960 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3961 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3962 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3963 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3964 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3966 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3967 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3968 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3969 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3970 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3971 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3972 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3973 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3974 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3975 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3976 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3977 struct dentry *dir);
3978 #endif
3979 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3980 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3981 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3983 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3984 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3985 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3986 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3987 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3988 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3989 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3990 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3991 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3992 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3993 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3994 u32 changed);
3995 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3996 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3997 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3998 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3999 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4000 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4001 struct station_info *sinfo);
4002 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4003 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
4004 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4005 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4006 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4007 u64 tsf);
4008 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4009 s64 offset);
4010 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4011 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4012
4013 /**
4014 * @ampdu_action:
4015 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4016 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4017 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4018 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4019 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4020 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4021 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4022 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4023 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4024 *
4025 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4026 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4027 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4028 *
4029 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4030 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4031 *
4032 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4033 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4034 * - ``TX: 81``
4035 *
4036 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4037 *
4038 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4039 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4040 * if the session can start immediately.
4041 *
4042 * The callback can sleep.
4043 */
4044 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4045 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4046 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4047 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4048 struct survey_info *survey);
4049 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4050 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4051 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4052 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053 void *data, int len);
4054 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4055 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4056 void *data, int len);
4057 #endif
4058 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4059 u32 queues, bool drop);
4060 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4061 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4062 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4063 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4064 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4065
4066 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4067 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4068 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4069 int duration,
4070 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4071 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4072 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4073 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4074 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4075 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4076 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4077 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4078 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4079 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4080 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4081 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4082
4083 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4084 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4085 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4086 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4087 bool more_data);
4088 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4089 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4090 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4091 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4092 bool more_data);
4093
4094 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4095 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4096 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4097 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4098 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4099 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4100 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4101 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4102
4103 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4104 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4105 u16 duration);
4106
4107 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4108 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4109
4110 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4111 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4112 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4113 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4114 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4115 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4116 u32 changed);
4117 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4118 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4119 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4120 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4122 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4123 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4124 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4125 int n_vifs,
4126 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4127
4128 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4129 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4130
4131 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4132 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4133 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4134 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4135 #endif
4136 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4137 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4138 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4139 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4140 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4141 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4142
4143 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4144 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4145 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4146 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4147 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4148 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4149 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4150
4151 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4152 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4153 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4154 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4155 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4156 int *dbm);
4157
4158 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4159 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4160 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4161 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4162 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4163 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4164 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4165 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4166 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4167 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4168 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4169
4170 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4171 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4172 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4173
4174 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4175 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4176 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4177 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4179 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4180 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4181 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4182 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4183 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4184 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4185 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4186 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4187 u8 instance_id);
4188 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4189 struct sk_buff *head,
4190 struct sk_buff *skb);
4191 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4192 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4193 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4194 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4195 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4196 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4197 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4198 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4199 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4200 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4201 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4202 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4203 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4204 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4205 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4206 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4207 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4208 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4209
4210 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
4211 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
4212 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
4213 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
4214 };
4215
4216 /**
4217 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4218 *
4219 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4220 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4221 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4222 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4223 * @priv_data_len.
4224 *
4225 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4226 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4227 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4228 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4229 *
4230 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4231 */
4232 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4233 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4234 const char *requested_name);
4235
4236 /**
4237 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4238 *
4239 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4240 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4241 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4242 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4243 * @priv_data_len.
4244 *
4245 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4246 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4247 *
4248 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4249 */
4250 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4251 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4252 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4253 {
4254 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4255 }
4256
4257 /**
4258 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4259 *
4260 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4261 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4262 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4263 *
4264 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4265 *
4266 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4267 */
4268 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4269
4270 /**
4271 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4272 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4273 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4274 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4275 */
4276 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4277 int throughput;
4278 int blink_time;
4279 };
4280
4281 /**
4282 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4283 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4284 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4285 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4286 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4287 */
4288 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4289 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4290 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4291 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4292 };
4293
4294 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4295 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4296 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4297 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4298 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4299 const char *
4300 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4301 unsigned int flags,
4302 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4303 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4304 #endif
4305 /**
4306 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4307 *
4308 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4309 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4310 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4311 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4312 *
4313 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4314 *
4315 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4316 */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4317 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4318 {
4319 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4320 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4321 #else
4322 return NULL;
4323 #endif
4324 }
4325
4326 /**
4327 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4328 *
4329 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4330 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4331 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4332 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4333 *
4334 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4335 *
4336 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4337 */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4338 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4339 {
4340 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4341 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4342 #else
4343 return NULL;
4344 #endif
4345 }
4346
4347 /**
4348 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4349 *
4350 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4351 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4352 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4353 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4354 *
4355 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4356 *
4357 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4358 */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4359 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4360 {
4361 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4362 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4363 #else
4364 return NULL;
4365 #endif
4366 }
4367
4368 /**
4369 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4370 *
4371 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4372 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4373 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4374 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4375 *
4376 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4377 *
4378 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4379 */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4380 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4381 {
4382 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4383 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4384 #else
4385 return NULL;
4386 #endif
4387 }
4388
4389 /**
4390 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4391 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4392 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4393 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4394 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4395 *
4396 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4397 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4398 *
4399 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4400 */
4401 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4402 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4403 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4404 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4405 {
4406 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4407 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4408 blink_table_len);
4409 #else
4410 return NULL;
4411 #endif
4412 }
4413
4414 /**
4415 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4416 *
4417 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4418 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4419 *
4420 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4421 */
4422 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4423
4424 /**
4425 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4426 *
4427 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4428 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4429 * before calling this function.
4430 *
4431 * @hw: the hardware to free
4432 */
4433 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4434
4435 /**
4436 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4437 *
4438 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4439 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4440 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4441 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4442 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4443 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4444 *
4445 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4446 */
4447 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4448
4449 /**
4450 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4451 *
4452 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4453 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4454 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4455 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4456 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4457 *
4458 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4459 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4460 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4461 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4462 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4463 *
4464 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4465 *
4466 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4467 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4468 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4469 * @list: the destination list
4470 */
4471 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4472 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4473
4474 /**
4475 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4476 *
4477 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4478 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4479 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4480 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4481 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4482 *
4483 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4484 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4485 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4486 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4487 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4488 *
4489 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4490 *
4491 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4492 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4493 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4494 * @napi: the NAPI context
4495 */
4496 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4497 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4498
4499 /**
4500 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4501 *
4502 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4503 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4504 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4505 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4506 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4507 *
4508 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4509 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4510 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4511 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4512 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4513 *
4514 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4515 *
4516 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4517 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4518 */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4519 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4520 {
4521 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4522 }
4523
4524 /**
4525 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4526 *
4527 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4528 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4529 *
4530 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4531 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4532 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4533 *
4534 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4535 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4536 */
4537 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4538
4539 /**
4540 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4541 *
4542 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4543 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4544 *
4545 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4546 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4547 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4548 *
4549 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4550 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4551 */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4552 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4553 struct sk_buff *skb)
4554 {
4555 local_bh_disable();
4556 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4557 local_bh_enable();
4558 }
4559
4560 /**
4561 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4562 *
4563 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4564 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4565 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4566 *
4567 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4568 *
4569 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4570 * each other.
4571 *
4572 * @sta: currently connected sta
4573 * @start: start or stop PS
4574 *
4575 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4576 */
4577 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4578
4579 /**
4580 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4581 * (in process context)
4582 *
4583 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4584 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4585 * applies.
4586 *
4587 * @sta: currently connected sta
4588 * @start: start or stop PS
4589 *
4590 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4591 */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4592 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4593 bool start)
4594 {
4595 int ret;
4596
4597 local_bh_disable();
4598 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4599 local_bh_enable();
4600
4601 return ret;
4602 }
4603
4604 /**
4605 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4606 * @sta: currently connected station
4607 *
4608 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4609 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4610 * connected station was received.
4611 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4612 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4613 * be serialized.
4614 */
4615 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4616
4617 /**
4618 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4619 * @sta: currently connected station
4620 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4621 *
4622 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4623 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4624 * from a connected station was received.
4625 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4626 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4627 * serialized.
4628 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4629 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4630 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4631 * checks.
4632 */
4633 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4634
4635 /*
4636 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4637 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4638 */
4639 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4640
4641 /**
4642 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4643 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4644 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4645 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4646 *
4647 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4648 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4649 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4650 *
4651 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4652 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4653 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4654 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4655 *
4656 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4657 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4658 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4659 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4660 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4661 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4662 *
4663 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4664 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4665 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4666 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4667 * use this API.
4668 */
4669 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4670 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4671
4672 /**
4673 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4674 *
4675 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4676 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4677 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4678 *
4679 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4680 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4681 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4682 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4683 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4684 */
4685 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4686 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4687 struct sk_buff *skb,
4688 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4689 int max_rates);
4690
4691 /**
4692 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4693 *
4694 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4695 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4696 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4697 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4698 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4699 * slow stations to starve).
4700 *
4701 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4702 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4703 */
4704 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4705 u32 thr);
4706
4707 /**
4708 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4709 *
4710 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4711 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4712 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4713 *
4714 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4715 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4716 * @info: tx status information
4717 */
4718 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4719 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4720 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4721
4722 /**
4723 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4724 *
4725 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4726 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4727 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4728 *
4729 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4730 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4731 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4732 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4733 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4734 *
4735 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4736 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4737 */
4738 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4739 struct sk_buff *skb);
4740
4741 /**
4742 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4743 *
4744 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4745 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4746 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4747 *
4748 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4749 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4750 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4751 *
4752 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4753 * @status: tx status information
4754 */
4755 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4756 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4757
4758 /**
4759 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4760 *
4761 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4762 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4763 * specific skbs.
4764 *
4765 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4766 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4767 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4768 *
4769 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4770 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4771 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4772 * @info: tx status information
4773 */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4774 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4775 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4776 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4777 {
4778 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4779 .sta = sta,
4780 .info = info,
4781 };
4782
4783 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4784 }
4785
4786 /**
4787 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4788 *
4789 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4790 *
4791 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4792 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4793 * for a single hardware.
4794 *
4795 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4796 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4797 */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4798 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4799 struct sk_buff *skb)
4800 {
4801 local_bh_disable();
4802 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4803 local_bh_enable();
4804 }
4805
4806 /**
4807 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4808 *
4809 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4810 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4811 *
4812 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4813 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4814 *
4815 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4816 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4817 */
4818 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4819 struct sk_buff *skb);
4820
4821 /**
4822 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4823 *
4824 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4825 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4826 * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4827 * 802.11 frames.
4828 *
4829 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4830 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4831 * calls in the same tx status family.
4832 *
4833 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4834 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4835 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4836 */
4837 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4838 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4839 struct sk_buff *skb);
4840
4841 /**
4842 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4843 *
4844 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4845 * connected STA.
4846 *
4847 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4848 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4849 */
4850 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4851
4852 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4853
4854 /**
4855 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4856 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4857 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4858 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4859 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
4860 * should be ignored.
4861 */
4862 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4863 u16 tim_offset;
4864 u16 tim_length;
4865
4866 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
4867 };
4868
4869 /**
4870 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4871 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4872 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4873 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4874 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4875 *
4876 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4877 * obtain the beacon template.
4878 *
4879 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4880 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4881 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4882 * applicable, the CSA count.
4883 *
4884 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4885 *
4886 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4887 */
4888 struct sk_buff *
4889 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4890 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4891 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4892
4893 /**
4894 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4895 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4896 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4897 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4898 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4899 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4900 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4901 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4902 *
4903 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4904 * obtain the beacon frame.
4905 *
4906 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4907 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4908 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4909 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4910 *
4911 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4912 *
4913 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4914 */
4915 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4916 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4917 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4918
4919 /**
4920 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4921 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4922 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4923 *
4924 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4925 *
4926 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4927 */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)4928 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4929 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4930 {
4931 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4932 }
4933
4934 /**
4935 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
4936 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4937 *
4938 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4939 * This function is called implicitly when
4940 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4941 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4942 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
4943 *
4944 * Return: new countdown value
4945 */
4946 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4947
4948 /**
4949 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
4950 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4951 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4952 *
4953 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
4954 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4955 *
4956 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
4957 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4958 */
4959 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4960
4961 /**
4962 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4963 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4964 *
4965 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4966 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4967 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4968 */
4969 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4970
4971 /**
4972 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
4973 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4974 *
4975 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
4976 */
4977 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4978
4979 /**
4980 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4981 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4982 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4983 *
4984 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4985 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4986 *
4987 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4988 *
4989 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4990 */
4991 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4992 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4993
4994 /**
4995 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4996 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4997 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4998 *
4999 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5000 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5001 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5002 *
5003 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5004 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5005 *
5006 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5007 */
5008 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5009 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5010
5011 /**
5012 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5013 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5014 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5015 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5016 * if at all possible
5017 *
5018 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5019 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5020 * BSSID and address is used.
5021 *
5022 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5023 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5024 *
5025 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5026 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5027 *
5028 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5029 */
5030 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5031 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5032 bool qos_ok);
5033
5034 /**
5035 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5036 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5037 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5038 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5039 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5040 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5041 *
5042 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5043 * hardware.
5044 *
5045 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5046 */
5047 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5048 const u8 *src_addr,
5049 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5050 size_t tailroom);
5051
5052 /**
5053 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5054 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5055 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5056 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5057 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5058 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5059 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5060 *
5061 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5062 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5063 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5064 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5065 */
5066 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5067 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5068 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5069 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5070
5071 /**
5072 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5073 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5074 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5075 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5076 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5077 *
5078 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5079 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5080 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5081 *
5082 * Return: The duration.
5083 */
5084 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5085 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5086 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5087
5088 /**
5089 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5090 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5091 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5092 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5093 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5094 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5095 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5096 *
5097 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5098 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5099 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5100 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5101 */
5102 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5103 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5104 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5105 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5106 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5107
5108 /**
5109 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5110 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5111 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5112 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5113 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5114 *
5115 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5116 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5117 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5118 *
5119 * Return: The duration.
5120 */
5121 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5122 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5123 size_t frame_len,
5124 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5125
5126 /**
5127 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5128 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5129 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5130 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5131 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5132 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5133 *
5134 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5135 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5136 *
5137 * Return: The duration.
5138 */
5139 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5140 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5141 enum nl80211_band band,
5142 size_t frame_len,
5143 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5144
5145 /**
5146 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5147 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5148 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5149 *
5150 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5151 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5152 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5153 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5154 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5155 *
5156 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5157 * frames are available.
5158 *
5159 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5160 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5161 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5162 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5163 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5164 * use common code for all beacons.
5165 */
5166 struct sk_buff *
5167 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5168
5169 /**
5170 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5171 *
5172 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5173 *
5174 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5175 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5176 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5177 */
5178 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5179 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5180
5181 /**
5182 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5183 *
5184 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5185 * from the given packet.
5186 *
5187 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5188 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5189 * with this P1K
5190 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5191 */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5192 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5193 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5194 {
5195 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5196 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5197 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5198
5199 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5200 }
5201
5202 /**
5203 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5204 *
5205 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5206 * and transmitter address.
5207 *
5208 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5209 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5210 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5211 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5212 */
5213 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5214 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5215
5216 /**
5217 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5218 *
5219 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5220 * in the packet.
5221 *
5222 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5223 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5224 * encrypted with this key
5225 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5226 */
5227 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5228 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5229
5230 /**
5231 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5232 *
5233 * @pos: start of crypto header
5234 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5235 * @pn: PN to add
5236 *
5237 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5238 * the packet payload)
5239 *
5240 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5241 * point to the crypto header)
5242 */
5243 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5244
5245 /**
5246 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5247 *
5248 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5249 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5250 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5251 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5252 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5253 *
5254 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5255 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5256 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5257 *
5258 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5259 * can be done concurrently.
5260 */
5261 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5262 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5263
5264 /**
5265 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5266 *
5267 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5268 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5269 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5270 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5271 * @seq: new sequence data
5272 *
5273 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5274 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5275 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5276 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5277 *
5278 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5279 * can be done concurrently.
5280 */
5281 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5282 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5283
5284 /**
5285 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5286 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5287 *
5288 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5289 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5290 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5291 *
5292 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5293 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5294 */
5295 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5296
5297 /**
5298 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5299 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5300 * @keyconf: new key data
5301 *
5302 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5303 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5304 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5305 *
5306 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5307 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5308 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5309 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5310 *
5311 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5312 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5313 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5314 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5315 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5316 * of the reconfiguration.
5317 *
5318 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5319 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5320 *
5321 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5322 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5323 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5324 * the key that's being replaced.
5325 */
5326 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5327 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5328 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5329
5330 /**
5331 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5332 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5333 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5334 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5335 * @gfp: allocation flags
5336 */
5337 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5338 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5339
5340 /**
5341 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5342 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5343 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5344 *
5345 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5346 */
5347 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5348
5349 /**
5350 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5351 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5352 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5353 *
5354 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5355 */
5356 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5357
5358 /**
5359 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5360 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5361 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5362 *
5363 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5364 *
5365 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5366 */
5367
5368 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5369
5370 /**
5371 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5372 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5373 *
5374 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5375 */
5376 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5377
5378 /**
5379 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5380 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5381 *
5382 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5383 */
5384 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5385
5386 /**
5387 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5388 *
5389 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5390 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5391 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5392 * any context, including hardirq context.
5393 *
5394 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5395 * @info: information about the completed scan
5396 */
5397 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5398 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5399
5400 /**
5401 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5402 *
5403 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5404 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5405 *
5406 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5407 */
5408 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5409
5410 /**
5411 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5412 *
5413 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5414 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5415 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5416 * while associating, for instance.
5417 *
5418 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5419 */
5420 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5421
5422 /**
5423 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5424 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5425 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5426 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5427 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5428 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5429 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5430 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5431 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5432 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5433 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5434 * for instance.
5435 */
5436 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5437 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5438 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5439 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5440 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
5441 };
5442
5443 /**
5444 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5445 *
5446 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5447 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5448 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5449 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5450 *
5451 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5452 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5453 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5454 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5455 */
5456 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5457 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5458 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5459 void *data);
5460
5461 /**
5462 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5463 *
5464 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5465 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5466 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5467 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5468 * be used.
5469 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5470 *
5471 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5472 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5473 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5474 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5475 */
5476 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5477 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5478 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5479 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5480 void *data)
5481 {
5482 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5483 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5484 iterator, data);
5485 }
5486
5487 /**
5488 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5489 *
5490 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5491 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5492 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5493 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5494 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5495 *
5496 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5497 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5498 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5499 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5500 */
5501 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5502 u32 iter_flags,
5503 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5504 u8 *mac,
5505 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5506 void *data);
5507
5508 /**
5509 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5510 *
5511 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5512 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5513 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5514 *
5515 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5516 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5517 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5518 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5519 */
5520 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5521 u32 iter_flags,
5522 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5523 u8 *mac,
5524 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5525 void *data);
5526
5527 /**
5528 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5529 *
5530 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5531 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5532 * function for them.
5533 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5534 *
5535 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5536 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5537 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5538 */
5539 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5540 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5541 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5542 void *data);
5543 /**
5544 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5545 *
5546 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5547 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5548 *
5549 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5550 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5551 */
5552 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5553
5554 /**
5555 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5556 *
5557 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5558 * workqueue.
5559 *
5560 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5561 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5562 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5563 */
5564 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5565 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5566 unsigned long delay);
5567
5568 /**
5569 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5570 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5571 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5572 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5573 *
5574 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5575 *
5576 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5577 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5578 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5579 */
5580 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5581 u16 timeout);
5582
5583 /**
5584 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5585 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5586 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5587 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5588 *
5589 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5590 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5591 * from any context.
5592 */
5593 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5594 u16 tid);
5595
5596 /**
5597 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5598 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5599 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5600 *
5601 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5602 *
5603 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5604 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5605 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5606 */
5607 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5608
5609 /**
5610 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5611 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5612 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5613 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5614 *
5615 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5616 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5617 * can be called from any context.
5618 */
5619 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5620 u16 tid);
5621
5622 /**
5623 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5624 *
5625 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5626 * @addr: station's address
5627 *
5628 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5629 *
5630 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5631 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5632 */
5633 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5634 const u8 *addr);
5635
5636 /**
5637 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5638 *
5639 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5640 * @addr: remote station's address
5641 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5642 *
5643 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5644 *
5645 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5646 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5647 *
5648 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5649 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5650 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5651 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5652 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5653 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5654 * is not reliable.
5655 *
5656 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5657 */
5658 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5659 const u8 *addr,
5660 const u8 *localaddr);
5661
5662 /**
5663 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5664 * @hw: the hardware
5665 * @pubsta: the station
5666 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5667 *
5668 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5669 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5670 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5671 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5672 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5673 *
5674 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5675 * manner.
5676 *
5677 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5678 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5679 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5680 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5681 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5682 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5683 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5684 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5685 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5686 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5687 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5688 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5689 * woke up while blocked or not.
5690 */
5691 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5692 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5693
5694 /**
5695 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5696 * @pubsta: the station
5697 *
5698 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5699 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5700 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5701 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5702 *
5703 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5704 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5705 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5706 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5707 *
5708 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5709 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5710 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5711 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5712 */
5713 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5714
5715 /**
5716 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5717 * @pubsta: the station
5718 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5719 *
5720 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5721 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5722 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5723 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5724 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5725 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5726 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5727 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5728 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5729 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5730 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5731 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5732 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5733 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5734 */
5735 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5736
5737 /**
5738 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5739 *
5740 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
5741 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5742 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5743 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5744 *
5745 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5746 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5747 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5748 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5749 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5750 * attempts.
5751 *
5752 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5753 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5754 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5755 * them to 0.
5756 *
5757 * @pubsta: the station
5758 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5759 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5760 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5761 */
5762 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5763 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5764
5765 /**
5766 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5767 *
5768 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5769 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5770 *
5771 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5772 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5773 */
5774 bool
5775 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5776
5777 /**
5778 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5779 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5780 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5781 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5782 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5783 *
5784 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5785 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5786 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5787 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5788 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5789 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5790 *
5791 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5792 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5793 * set_key callback.
5794 */
5795 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5796 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5797 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5798 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5799 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5800 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5801 void *data),
5802 void *iter_data);
5803
5804 /**
5805 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5806 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5807 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5808 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5809 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5810 *
5811 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5812 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5813 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5814 * in removal process will be skipped.
5815 *
5816 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5817 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5818 */
5819 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5820 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5821 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5822 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5823 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5824 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5825 void *data),
5826 void *iter_data);
5827
5828 /**
5829 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5830 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5831 * @iter: iterator function
5832 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5833 *
5834 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5835 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5836 * places while calling into the driver.
5837 *
5838 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5839 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5840 * removed.
5841 *
5842 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5843 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5844 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5845 * or not.
5846 */
5847 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5848 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5849 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5850 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5851 void *data),
5852 void *iter_data);
5853
5854 /**
5855 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5856 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5857 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5858 *
5859 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5860 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5861 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5862 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5863 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5864 * %NULL.
5865 *
5866 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5867 */
5868 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5870
5871 /**
5872 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5873 *
5874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5875 *
5876 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5877 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5878 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5879 */
5880 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5881
5882 /**
5883 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5884 *
5885 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5886 *
5887 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5888 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5889 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5890 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5891 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5892 *
5893 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5894 * without connection recovery attempts.
5895 */
5896 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5897
5898 /**
5899 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5900 *
5901 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5902 *
5903 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5904 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5905 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5906 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5907 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5908 *
5909 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5910 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5911 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5912 * disconnect normally later.
5913 *
5914 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5915 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5916 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5917 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5918 */
5919 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5920
5921 /**
5922 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5923 * rssi threshold triggered
5924 *
5925 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5926 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5927 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5928 * @gfp: context flags
5929 *
5930 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5931 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5932 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5933 */
5934 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5935 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5936 s32 rssi_level,
5937 gfp_t gfp);
5938
5939 /**
5940 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5941 *
5942 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5943 * @gfp: context flags
5944 */
5945 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5946
5947 /**
5948 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5949 *
5950 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5951 */
5952 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5953
5954 /**
5955 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5956 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5957 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5958 *
5959 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5960 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5961 */
5962 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5963
5964 /**
5965 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5966 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5967 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5968 *
5969 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5970 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5971 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5972 */
5973 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5974 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5975
5976 /**
5977 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5978 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5979 */
5980 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5981
5982 /**
5983 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5984 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5985 */
5986 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5987
5988 /**
5989 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5990 *
5991 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5992 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5993 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5994 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5995 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5996 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5997 *
5998 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5999 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6000 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6001 */
6002 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6003 const u8 *addr);
6004
6005 /**
6006 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6007 * @pubsta: station struct
6008 * @tid: the session's TID
6009 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6010 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
6011 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6012 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6013 *
6014 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6015 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6016 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6017 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6018 */
6019 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6020 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6021 u16 received_mpdus);
6022
6023 /**
6024 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6025 *
6026 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6027 * buffer.
6028 *
6029 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6030 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6031 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6032 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6033 */
6034 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6035
6036 /**
6037 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6038 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6039 * @addr: station mac address
6040 * @tid: the rx tid
6041 */
6042 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6043 unsigned int tid);
6044
6045 /**
6046 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6047 *
6048 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6049 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6050 * reordering.
6051 *
6052 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6053 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6054 *
6055 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6056 * @addr: station mac address
6057 * @tid: the rx tid
6058 */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6059 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6060 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6061 {
6062 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6063 return;
6064 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6065 }
6066
6067 /**
6068 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6069 *
6070 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6071 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6072 * reordering.
6073 *
6074 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6075 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6076 *
6077 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6078 * @addr: station mac address
6079 * @tid: the rx tid
6080 */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6081 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6082 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6083 {
6084 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6085 return;
6086 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6087 }
6088
6089 /**
6090 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6091 *
6092 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6093 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6094 *
6095 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6096 *
6097 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6098 * @addr: station mac address
6099 * @tid: the rx tid
6100 */
6101 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6102 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6103
6104 /* Rate control API */
6105
6106 /**
6107 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6108 *
6109 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6110 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6111 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6112 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6113 * to be filled in
6114 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6115 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6116 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6117 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6118 * RTS threshold
6119 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6120 * if the selected rate supports it
6121 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6122 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6123 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6124 */
6125 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6126 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6127 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6128 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6129 struct sk_buff *skb;
6130 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6131 bool rts, short_preamble;
6132 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6133 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6134 bool bss;
6135 };
6136
6137 /**
6138 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6139 */
6140 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6141 /**
6142 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6143 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6144 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6145 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6146 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6147 */
6148 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6149 };
6150
6151 struct rate_control_ops {
6152 unsigned long capa;
6153 const char *name;
6154 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6155 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6156 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6157 void (*free)(void *priv);
6158
6159 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6160 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6161 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6162 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6163 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6164 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6165 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6166 u32 changed);
6167 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6168 void *priv_sta);
6169
6170 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6171 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6172 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6173 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6174 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6175 struct sk_buff *skb);
6176 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6177 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6178
6179 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6180 struct dentry *dir);
6181
6182 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6183
6184 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
6185 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
6186 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
6187 ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
6188 };
6189
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6190 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6191 enum nl80211_band band,
6192 int index)
6193 {
6194 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6195 }
6196
6197 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6198 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6199 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6200 {
6201 int i;
6202
6203 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6204 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6205 return i;
6206
6207 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6208 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6209
6210 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6211 return 0;
6212 }
6213
6214 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6215 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6216 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6217 {
6218 unsigned int i;
6219
6220 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6221 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6222 return true;
6223 return false;
6224 }
6225
6226 /**
6227 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6228 *
6229 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6230 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6231 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6232 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6233 *
6234 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6235 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6236 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6237 */
6238 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6239 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6240 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6241
6242 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6243 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6244
6245 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6246 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6247 {
6248 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6249 }
6250
6251 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6252 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6253 {
6254 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6255 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6256 }
6257
6258 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6259 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6260 {
6261 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6262 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6263 }
6264
6265 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6266 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6267 {
6268 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6269 }
6270
6271 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6272 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6273 {
6274 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6275 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6276 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6277 }
6278
6279 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6280 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6281 {
6282 if (p2p) {
6283 switch (type) {
6284 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6285 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6286 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6287 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6288 default:
6289 break;
6290 }
6291 }
6292 return type;
6293 }
6294
6295 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6296 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6297 {
6298 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6299 }
6300
6301 /**
6302 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6303 *
6304 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6305 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6306 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6307 *
6308 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6309 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6310 * matching GroupId management frame.
6311 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6312 */
6313 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6314 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6315
6316 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6317 int rssi_min_thold,
6318 int rssi_max_thold);
6319
6320 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6321
6322 /**
6323 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6324 *
6325 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6326 *
6327 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6328 *
6329 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6330 * applicable.
6331 */
6332 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6333
6334 /**
6335 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6336 * @vif: virtual interface
6337 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6338 * @gfp: allocation flags
6339 *
6340 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6341 */
6342 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6343 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6344 gfp_t gfp);
6345
6346 /**
6347 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6348 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6349 * @vif: virtual interface
6350 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6351 * @band: the band to transmit on
6352 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6353 *
6354 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6355 */
6356 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6357 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6358 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6359
6360 /**
6361 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6362 * of injected frames.
6363 *
6364 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6365 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6366 * of the skb before calling this function.
6367 *
6368 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6369 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6370 */
6371 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6372 struct net_device *dev);
6373
6374 /**
6375 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6376 *
6377 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6378 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6379 *
6380 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6381 *
6382 * private:
6383 *
6384 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6385 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6386 */
6387 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6388 u32 next_tsf;
6389 bool has_next_tsf;
6390
6391 u8 absent;
6392
6393 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6394 struct {
6395 u32 start;
6396 u32 duration;
6397 u32 interval;
6398 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6399 };
6400
6401 /**
6402 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6403 *
6404 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6405 * @data: NoA tracking data
6406 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6407 *
6408 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6409 */
6410 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6411 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6412
6413 /**
6414 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6415 *
6416 * @data: NoA tracking data
6417 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6418 */
6419 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6420
6421 /**
6422 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6423 * @vif: virtual interface
6424 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6425 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6426 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6427 * @gfp: allocation flags
6428 *
6429 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6430 */
6431 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6432 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6433 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6434
6435 /**
6436 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6437 *
6438 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6439 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6440 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6441 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6442 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6443 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6444 *
6445 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6446 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6447 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6448 *
6449 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6450 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6451 *
6452 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6453 */
6454 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6455
6456 /**
6457 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6458 *
6459 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6460 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6461 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6462 *
6463 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6464 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6465 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6466 *
6467 * @sta: the station
6468 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6469 */
6470 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6471
6472 /**
6473 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6474 *
6475 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6476 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6477 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6478 *
6479 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6480 *
6481 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6482 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6483 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6484 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6485 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6486 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6487 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6488 *
6489 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6490 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6491 */
6492 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6493 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6494
6495 /**
6496 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6497 * (in process context)
6498 *
6499 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6500 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6501 *
6502 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6503 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6504 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6505 */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6506 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6507 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6508 {
6509 struct sk_buff *skb;
6510
6511 local_bh_disable();
6512 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6513 local_bh_enable();
6514
6515 return skb;
6516 }
6517
6518 /**
6519 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6520 *
6521 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6522 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6523 *
6524 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6525 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6526 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6527 */
6528 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6529
6530 /**
6531 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6532 *
6533 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6534 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6535 *
6536 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6537 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6538 */
6539 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6540
6541 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6542 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6543 {
6544 }
6545
6546 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6547 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6548
6549 /**
6550 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6551 *
6552 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6553 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6554 *
6555 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6556 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6557 *
6558 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6559 * this TXQ internally.
6560 */
6561 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6562 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6563 {
6564 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6565 }
6566
6567 /**
6568 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6569 *
6570 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6571 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6572 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6573 *
6574 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6575 * internally.
6576 */
6577 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)6578 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6579 bool force)
6580 {
6581 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6582 }
6583
6584 /**
6585 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6586 *
6587 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6588 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6589 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6590 * next_txq().
6591 *
6592 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6593 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6594 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6595 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6596 * again.
6597 *
6598 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6599 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6600 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6601 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6602 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6603 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6604 *
6605 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6606 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6607 */
6608 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6609 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6610
6611 /**
6612 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6613 *
6614 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6615 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6616 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6617 *
6618 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6619 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6620 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6621 */
6622 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6623 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6624 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6625
6626 /**
6627 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6628 *
6629 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6630 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6631 *
6632 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6633 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6634 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6635 * @gfp: allocation flags
6636 */
6637 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6638 u8 inst_id,
6639 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6640 gfp_t gfp);
6641
6642 /**
6643 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6644 *
6645 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6646 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6647 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6648 *
6649 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6650 * @match: match event information
6651 * @gfp: allocation flags
6652 */
6653 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6654 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6655 gfp_t gfp);
6656
6657 /**
6658 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6659 *
6660 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6661 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6662 *
6663 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6664 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6665 * information.
6666 * @len: frame length in bytes
6667 */
6668 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6669 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6670 int len);
6671
6672 /**
6673 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6674 *
6675 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6676 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6677 *
6678 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6679 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6680 * @len: frame length in bytes
6681 */
6682 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6683 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6684 int len);
6685 /**
6686 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6687 *
6688 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6689 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6690 * hardware or firmware.
6691 *
6692 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6693 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6694 */
6695 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6696
6697 /**
6698 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
6699 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6700 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6701 *
6702 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6703 *
6704 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
6705 */
6706 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6707 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6708
6709 /**
6710 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
6711 * probe response template.
6712 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6713 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6714 *
6715 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
6716 *
6717 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
6718 */
6719 struct sk_buff *
6720 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6721 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6722 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6723